summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu')
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/DESCRIPTION2
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/Makefile2
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-lualatex.pdfbin151835 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-lualatex.tex686
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-pdflatex.pdfbin395422 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-pdflatex.tex693
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/example.bib123
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-lualatex.pdfbin160530 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-lualatex.tex651
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-pdflatex.pdfbin403959 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-pdflatex.tex658
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-lualatex.pdfbin159235 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-lualatex.tex645
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-pdflatex.pdfbin402743 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-pdflatex.tex652
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-lualatex.pdfbin159852 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-lualatex.tex658
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-pdflatex.pdfbin403320 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-pdflatex.tex665
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-lualatex.pdfbin173889 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-lualatex.tex659
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-pdflatex.pdfbin417353 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-pdflatex.tex666
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-lualatex.pdfbin149373 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-lualatex.tex661
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-pdflatex.pdfbin392952 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-pdflatex.tex668
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-lualatex.pdfbin158066 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-lualatex.tex662
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-pdflatex.pdfbin401356 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-pdflatex.tex669
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-lualatex.pdfbin159786 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-lualatex.tex650
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-pdflatex.pdfbin402870 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-pdflatex.tex657
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-lualatex.pdfbin180370 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-lualatex.tex693
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-pdflatex.pdfbin427910 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-pdflatex.tex700
39 files changed, 0 insertions, 12120 deletions
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/DESCRIPTION b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/DESCRIPTION
deleted file mode 100644
index e875f3124c..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/DESCRIPTION
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-This directory contains example documents for the various faculties
-of the Masaryk University (Brno, Czech Republic).
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/Makefile b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/Makefile
deleted file mode 100644
index c9bda433fb..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/Makefile
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-.PHONY: implode
-implode:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-lualatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-lualatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 1af9961166..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-lualatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-lualatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-lualatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index a41a25d719..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-lualatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,686 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/econ.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage{polyglossia} %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the
-\setmainlanguage{english} %% main locale instead of `english`, you
-%% can typeset the thesis in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
-\setotherlanguages{german, russian, czech, slovak} %% The
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\newfontfamily\russianfont[Script=Cyrillic,Ligatures=TeX]{PT Serif}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- autoLayout = false,
- university = mu,
- faculty = econ,
- type = bc,
- field = Applied Econometrics,
- department = Department of Finance,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- extra = {
- advisorCsGenitiv = {Johna Smithe},
- advisorSkGenitiv = {Johna Smitha},
- },
- title = The Economic Value of LaTeX,
- TeXtitle = The Economic Value of \LaTeX,
- keywords = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywords = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstract = {This is the abstract of my thesis, which
- can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my
- thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
- %% Uncomment the following line (by removing the % symbol at
- %% the beginning) and replace `assignment.pdf` with the
- %% filename of your scanned thesis assignment.
- % assignment = assignment.pdf,
- %% The following keys are only useful, when you're using a
- %% locale other than English. You can safely omit them in an
- %% English thesis.
- titleEn = The Economic Value of LaTeX,
- TeXtitleEn = The Economic Value of \LaTeX,
- keywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstractEn = {This is the English abstract of my
- thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\usepackage{chngcntr}
-\counterwithout{table}{chapter} % Flat numbering of tables.
-\counterwithout{figure}{chapter} % Flat numbering of figures.
-\begin{document}
-\makeatletter
- \thesis@preamble %% Print the preamble.
-\makeatother
-
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \emph{Source: <<Image Source>>}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \emph{Source: <<Image Source>>}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \vskip\abovecaptionskip\emph{Source: <<Table Source>>}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{lualatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\makeatletter
- \thesis@postamble %% Print the postamble.
-\makeatother
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-pdflatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-pdflatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 2079d72e06..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-pdflatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-pdflatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-pdflatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index cfc5539fc7..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/econ-pdflatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,693 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/econ.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage[resetfonts]{cmap} %% We need to load the T2A font encoding
-\usepackage[T1,T2A]{fontenc} %% to use the Cyrillic fonts with Russian texts.
-\usepackage[
- main=english, %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the main locale
- %% instead of `english`, you can typeset the thesis
- %% in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
- english, german, russian, czech, slovak %% The additional keys allow
-]{babel} %% foreign texts to be typeset as follows:
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\usepackage{paratype}
-\def\textrussian#1{{\usefont{T2A}{PTSerif-TLF}{m}{rm}#1}}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- autoLayout = false,
- university = mu,
- faculty = econ,
- type = bc,
- field = Applied Econometrics,
- department = Department of Finance,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- extra = {
- advisorCsGenitiv = {Johna Smithe},
- advisorSkGenitiv = {Johna Smitha},
- },
- title = The Economic Value of LaTeX,
- TeXtitle = The Economic Value of \LaTeX,
- keywords = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywords = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstract = {This is the abstract of my thesis, which
- can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my
- thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
- %% Uncomment the following line (by removing the % symbol at
- %% the beginning) and replace `assignment.pdf` with the
- %% filename of your scanned thesis assignment.
- % assignment = assignment.pdf,
- %% The following keys are only useful, when you're using a
- %% locale other than English. You can safely omit them in an
- %% English thesis.
- titleEn = The Economic Value of LaTeX,
- TeXtitleEn = The Economic Value of \LaTeX,
- keywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstractEn = {This is the English abstract of my
- thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\usepackage{chngcntr}
-\counterwithout{table}{chapter} % Flat numbering of tables.
-\counterwithout{figure}{chapter} % Flat numbering of figures.
-\begin{document}
-\makeatletter
- \thesis@preamble %% Print the preamble.
-\makeatother
-
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}\textrussian{%
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-}\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \emph{Source: <<Image Source>>}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \emph{Source: <<Image Source>>}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \vskip\abovecaptionskip\emph{Source: <<Table Source>>}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{pdflatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\shorthandoff{-}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-\shorthandon{-}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\makeatletter
- \thesis@postamble %% Print the postamble.
-\makeatother
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/example.bib b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/example.bib
deleted file mode 100644
index 60b8b9ec79..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/example.bib
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,123 +0,0 @@
-% The example bibliographical entries below were borrowed from the
-% <https://www.ctan.org/pkg/biblatex-iso690> package documentation.
-
-% BORGMAN, Christine L., 2003. From Gutenberg to the global information
-% infrastructure: access to information in the networked world. First. Cambridge
-% (Mass): The MIT Press. ISBN 0-262-52345-0 [xviii, 324]
-
-@BOOK{borgman03,
- author = {Borgman, Christine L.},
- date = {2003},
- title = {From Gutenberg to the global information infrastructure},
- subtitle = {access to information in the networked world},
- edition = {1}, % should not be stated
- location = {Cambridge (Mass)},
- publisher = {The MIT Press},
- pagetotal = {xviii, 324},
- isbn = {0-262-52345-0},
- langid = {english}
-}
-
-% GREENBERG, David, 1998. Camel drivers and gatecrashers: quality control in
-% the digital research library. In: HAWKINS, B.L et al. (eds.). The mirage of
-% continuity: reconfiguring academic information resources for the 21st
-% century. Washington (D.C.): Council on Library and Information Resources;
-% Association of American Universities, pp. 105–116
-
-@INCOLLECTION{greenberg98,
- crossref = {mirage98},
- author = {Greenberg, David},
- title = {Camel drivers and gatecrashers},
- subtitle = {quality control in the digital research library},
- pages = {105-116},
-}
-
-@COLLECTION{mirage98,
- title = {The mirage of continuity},
- subtitle = {reconfiguring academic information
- resources for the 21st century},
- editor = {Hawkins, B.L and Battin, P},
- date = {1998},
- location = {Washington (D.C.)},
- publisher = {Council on Library and Information Resources;
- Association of American Universities},
- langid = {english}
-}
-
-% LYNCH, C., 2005. Where do we go from here?: the next decade for digital
-% libraries. DLib Magazine [online]. Vol. 11, no. 7/8 [visited on 2005-08-15].
-% ISSN 1082-9873. Available from:
-% http://www.dlib.org/dlib/july05/lynch/07lynch.html
-
-@ARTICLE{lynch05,
- crossref = {dlib},
- author = {Lynch, C.},
- title = {Where do we go from here?},
- subtitle = {the next decade for digital libraries},
- url = {http://www.dlib.org/dlib/july05/lynch/07lynch.html},
- urldate = {2005-08-15}
-}
-
-@PERIODICAL{dlib,
- journaltitle = {DLib Magazine},
- date = {2005},
- volume = {11},
- number = {7/8},
- issn = {1082-9873},
- langid = {english},
-}
-
-% HÀN, Thé Thành, 2001. Micro-typographic extensions to the TEX type- setting
-% system [online]. Brno [visited on 2016-12-09]. Available from:
-% http://www.pragma-ade.nl/pdftex/thesis.pdf. PhD thesis. The Faculty of
-% Informatics, Masaryk University.
-
-@PHDTHESIS{thanh01,
- author = {Hàn Thé, Thành},
- title = {Micro-typographic extensions to the \TeX{} typesetting system},
- date = {2001},
- institution = {The Faculty of Informatics, Masaryk University},
- location = {Brno},
- url = {http://www.pragma-ade.nl/pdftex/thesis.pdf},
- urldate = {2016-12-09},
- langid = {english}
-}
-
-% SHANNON, Claude Elwood, 1940. A symbolic analysis of relay and switching
-% circuits. Available from DOI: 1721.1/11173. Master’s thesis. Massachusetts
-% Institute of Technology.
-
-@MASTERSTHESIS{shannon40,
- author = {Shannon, Claude Elwood},
- title = {A symbolic analysis of relay and switching circuits},
- date = {1940},
- institution = {Massachusetts Institute of Technology},
- langid = {english},
- doi = {1721.1/11173},
-}
-
-% EHLINGER JR., Philip Charles. Device for the treatment of hiccups. US.
-% US Patent, 7062320.
-
-@PATENT{ehlinger06,
- author = {Ehlinger Jr., Philip Charles},
- title = {Device for the treatment of hiccups},
- type = {US Patent},
- location = {US},
- date = {2006},
- number = {7062320},
- langid = {english}
-}
-
-% Masaryk University, 1996–2009 [online]. Brno: Masaryk University
-% [visited on 2016-12-09]. Available from: https://www.muni.cz/en.
-
-@ONLINE{muni,
- publisher = {Masaryk University},
- title = {Masaryk University},
- date = {1996/2009},
- url = {https://www.muni.cz/en},
- urldate = {2016-12-09},
- location = {Brno},
- langid = {english}
-}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-lualatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-lualatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 20734c572e..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-lualatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-lualatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-lualatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 9fdd804037..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-lualatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,651 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/fi.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage{polyglossia} %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the
-\setmainlanguage{english} %% main locale instead of `english`, you
-%% can typeset the thesis in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
-\setotherlanguages{german, russian, czech, slovak} %% The
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\newfontfamily\russianfont[Script=Cyrillic,Ligatures=TeX]{PT Serif}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = fi,
- type = bc,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = {The Proof of P = NP},
- TeXtitle = {The Proof of $\mathsf{P}=\mathsf{NP}$},
- keywords = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywords = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstract = {This is the abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{lualatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-\ or %% Let us define a compound command:
-\def\citeauthoryear#1{(\textcite{#1},~\citeyear{#1})}%
-\citeauthoryear{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-pdflatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-pdflatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 5858d8b576..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-pdflatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-pdflatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-pdflatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 31c18bde1b..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fi-pdflatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,658 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/fi.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage[resetfonts]{cmap} %% We need to load the T2A font encoding
-\usepackage[T1,T2A]{fontenc} %% to use the Cyrillic fonts with Russian texts.
-\usepackage[
- main=english, %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the main locale
- %% instead of `english`, you can typeset the thesis
- %% in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
- english, german, russian, czech, slovak %% The additional keys allow
-]{babel} %% foreign texts to be typeset as follows:
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\usepackage{paratype}
-\def\textrussian#1{{\usefont{T2A}{PTSerif-TLF}{m}{rm}#1}}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = fi,
- type = bc,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = {The Proof of P = NP},
- TeXtitle = {The Proof of $\mathsf{P}=\mathsf{NP}$},
- keywords = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywords = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstract = {This is the abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}\textrussian{%
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-}\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{pdflatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\shorthandoff{-}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-\shorthandon{-}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-\ or %% Let us define a compound command:
-\def\citeauthoryear#1{(\textcite{#1},~\citeyear{#1})}%
-\citeauthoryear{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-lualatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-lualatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 2a5e95bb8e..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-lualatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-lualatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-lualatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index abec31eaf1..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-lualatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,645 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/fsps.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage{polyglossia} %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the
-\setmainlanguage{english} %% main locale instead of `english`, you
-%% can typeset the thesis in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
-\setotherlanguages{german, russian, czech, slovak} %% The
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\newfontfamily\russianfont[Script=Cyrillic,Ligatures=TeX]{PT Serif}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = fsps,
- type = bc,
- field = Sport Management,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = The use of LaTeX for the Typesetting
- of Sports Tables,
- TeXtitle = The use of \LaTeX\ for the Typesetting
- of Sports Tables,
- bib = example.bib,
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{lualatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- {\singlespacing
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
- }
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-pdflatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-pdflatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index db7adad919..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-pdflatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-pdflatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-pdflatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 35bb343b20..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fsps-pdflatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,652 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/fsps.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage[resetfonts]{cmap} %% We need to load the T2A font encoding
-\usepackage[T1,T2A]{fontenc} %% to use the Cyrillic fonts with Russian texts.
-\usepackage[
- main=english, %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the main locale
- %% instead of `english`, you can typeset the thesis
- %% in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
- english, german, russian, czech, slovak %% The additional keys allow
-]{babel} %% foreign texts to be typeset as follows:
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\usepackage{paratype}
-\def\textrussian#1{{\usefont{T2A}{PTSerif-TLF}{m}{rm}#1}}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = fsps,
- type = bc,
- field = Sport Management,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = The use of LaTeX for the Typesetting
- of Sports Tables,
- TeXtitle = The use of \LaTeX\ for the Typesetting
- of Sports Tables,
- bib = example.bib,
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}\textrussian{%
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-}\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{pdflatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\shorthandoff{-}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-\shorthandon{-}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- {\singlespacing
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
- }
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-lualatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-lualatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index e642cd22e9..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-lualatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-lualatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-lualatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 65365d503b..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-lualatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,658 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/fss.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage{polyglossia} %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the
-\setmainlanguage{english} %% main locale instead of `english`, you
-%% can typeset the thesis in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
-\setotherlanguages{german, russian, czech, slovak} %% The
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\newfontfamily\russianfont[Script=Cyrillic,Ligatures=TeX]{PT Serif}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = fss,
- type = bc,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = LaTeX and Its Impact on the
- Information Society,
- TeXtitle = \LaTeX\ and Its Impact on the
- Information Society,
- keywords = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywords = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstract = {This is the abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
- %% The following keys are only useful, when you're using a
- %% locale other than English. You can safely omit them in an
- %% English thesis.
- keywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstractEn = {This is the English abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{lualatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-pdflatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-pdflatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 03e8a4e464..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-pdflatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-pdflatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-pdflatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 9ca917560b..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/fss-pdflatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,665 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/fss.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage[resetfonts]{cmap} %% We need to load the T2A font encoding
-\usepackage[T1,T2A]{fontenc} %% to use the Cyrillic fonts with Russian texts.
-\usepackage[
- main=english, %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the main locale
- %% instead of `english`, you can typeset the thesis
- %% in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
- english, german, russian, czech, slovak %% The additional keys allow
-]{babel} %% foreign texts to be typeset as follows:
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\usepackage{paratype}
-\def\textrussian#1{{\usefont{T2A}{PTSerif-TLF}{m}{rm}#1}}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = fss,
- type = bc,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = LaTeX and Its Impact on the
- Information Society,
- TeXtitle = \LaTeX\ and Its Impact on the
- Information Society,
- keywords = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywords = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstract = {This is the abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
- %% The following keys are only useful, when you're using a
- %% locale other than English. You can safely omit them in an
- %% English thesis.
- keywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstractEn = {This is the English abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}\textrussian{%
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-}\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{pdflatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\shorthandoff{-}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-\shorthandon{-}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-lualatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-lualatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 6193dc362e..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-lualatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-lualatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-lualatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 6e0080e11c..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-lualatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,659 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/law.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage{polyglossia} %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the
-\setmainlanguage{english} %% main locale instead of `english`, you
-%% can typeset the thesis in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
-\setotherlanguages{german, russian, czech, slovak} %% The
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\newfontfamily\russianfont[Script=Cyrillic,Ligatures=TeX]{PT Serif}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = law,
- department = The Department of Commercial Law,
- type = bc,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = The Legal Aspects of the LaTeX Project
- Public License,
- TeXtitle = The Legal Aspects of the \LaTeX\ Project
- Public License,
- keywords = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywords = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstract = {This is the abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
- %% The following keys are only useful, when you're using a
- %% locale other than English. You can safely omit them in an
- %% English thesis.
- keywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstractEn = {This is the English abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{lualatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-pdflatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-pdflatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 18cd07d2a9..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-pdflatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-pdflatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-pdflatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 6c4ea5931d..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/law-pdflatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,666 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/law.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage[resetfonts]{cmap} %% We need to load the T2A font encoding
-\usepackage[T1,T2A]{fontenc} %% to use the Cyrillic fonts with Russian texts.
-\usepackage[
- main=english, %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the main locale
- %% instead of `english`, you can typeset the thesis
- %% in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
- english, german, russian, czech, slovak %% The additional keys allow
-]{babel} %% foreign texts to be typeset as follows:
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\usepackage{paratype}
-\def\textrussian#1{{\usefont{T2A}{PTSerif-TLF}{m}{rm}#1}}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = law,
- department = The Department of Commercial Law,
- type = bc,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = The Legal Aspects of the LaTeX Project
- Public License,
- TeXtitle = The Legal Aspects of the \LaTeX\ Project
- Public License,
- keywords = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywords = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstract = {This is the abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
- %% The following keys are only useful, when you're using a
- %% locale other than English. You can safely omit them in an
- %% English thesis.
- keywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstractEn = {This is the English abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}\textrussian{%
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-}\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{pdflatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\shorthandoff{-}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-\shorthandon{-}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-lualatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-lualatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 9e59c9d1f2..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-lualatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-lualatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-lualatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index f8483ad28a..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-lualatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,661 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/med.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage{polyglossia} %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the
-\setmainlanguage{english} %% main locale instead of `english`, you
-%% can typeset the thesis in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
-\setotherlanguages{german, russian, czech, slovak} %% The
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\newfontfamily\russianfont[Script=Cyrillic,Ligatures=TeX]{PT Serif}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = med,
- field = Optometry,
- department = The Department of Optometry and
- Orthoptics,
- type = bc,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = The Curative Effects of Good
- Typography on the Quality of Sight,
- TeXtitle = The Curative Effects of Good\\
- Typography on the Quality of Sight,
- keywords = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywords = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstract = {This is the abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
- %% The following keys are only useful, when you're using a
- %% locale other than English. You can safely omit them in an
- %% English thesis.
- keywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstractEn = {This is the English abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{lualatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-pdflatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-pdflatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 4d4adf5f44..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-pdflatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-pdflatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-pdflatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e672a80ad..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/med-pdflatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,668 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/med.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage[resetfonts]{cmap} %% We need to load the T2A font encoding
-\usepackage[T1,T2A]{fontenc} %% to use the Cyrillic fonts with Russian texts.
-\usepackage[
- main=english, %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the main locale
- %% instead of `english`, you can typeset the thesis
- %% in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
- english, german, russian, czech, slovak %% The additional keys allow
-]{babel} %% foreign texts to be typeset as follows:
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\usepackage{paratype}
-\def\textrussian#1{{\usefont{T2A}{PTSerif-TLF}{m}{rm}#1}}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = med,
- field = Optometry,
- department = The Department of Optometry and
- Orthoptics,
- type = bc,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = The Curative Effects of Good
- Typography on the Quality of Sight,
- TeXtitle = The Curative Effects of Good\\
- Typography on the Quality of Sight,
- keywords = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywords = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstract = {This is the abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
- %% The following keys are only useful, when you're using a
- %% locale other than English. You can safely omit them in an
- %% English thesis.
- keywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstractEn = {This is the English abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}\textrussian{%
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-}\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{pdflatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\shorthandoff{-}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-\shorthandon{-}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-lualatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-lualatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index d9ea42f658..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-lualatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-lualatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-lualatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index d00cf73bf5..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-lualatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,662 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/ped.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage{polyglossia} %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the
-\setmainlanguage{english} %% main locale instead of `english`, you
-%% can typeset the thesis in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
-\setotherlanguages{german, russian, czech, slovak} %% The
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\newfontfamily\russianfont[Script=Cyrillic,Ligatures=TeX]{PT Serif}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = ped,
- type = bc,
- department = Department of Primary Pedagogy,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = The Challenges of Teaching LaTeX
- to Preschool Children,
- TeXtitle = The Challenges of Teaching \LaTeX\
- to Preschool Children,
- keywords = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywords = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstract = {This is the abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
- %% The following keys are only useful, when you're using a
- %% locale other than English. You can safely omit them in an
- %% English thesis.
- keywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstractEn = {This is the English abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{lualatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-\ or %% Let us define a compound command:
-\def\citeauthoryear#1{(\textcite{#1},~\citeyear{#1})}%
-\citeauthoryear{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-pdflatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-pdflatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 70c2689c1b..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-pdflatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-pdflatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-pdflatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 04b0d63297..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/ped-pdflatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,669 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/ped.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage[resetfonts]{cmap} %% We need to load the T2A font encoding
-\usepackage[T1,T2A]{fontenc} %% to use the Cyrillic fonts with Russian texts.
-\usepackage[
- main=english, %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the main locale
- %% instead of `english`, you can typeset the thesis
- %% in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
- english, german, russian, czech, slovak %% The additional keys allow
-]{babel} %% foreign texts to be typeset as follows:
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\usepackage{paratype}
-\def\textrussian#1{{\usefont{T2A}{PTSerif-TLF}{m}{rm}#1}}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = ped,
- type = bc,
- department = Department of Primary Pedagogy,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = The Challenges of Teaching LaTeX
- to Preschool Children,
- TeXtitle = The Challenges of Teaching \LaTeX\
- to Preschool Children,
- keywords = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywords = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstract = {This is the abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
- %% The following keys are only useful, when you're using a
- %% locale other than English. You can safely omit them in an
- %% English thesis.
- keywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- abstractEn = {This is the English abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}\textrussian{%
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-}\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{pdflatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\shorthandoff{-}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-\shorthandon{-}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-\ or %% Let us define a compound command:
-\def\citeauthoryear#1{(\textcite{#1},~\citeyear{#1})}%
-\citeauthoryear{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-lualatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-lualatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index ed21bf2deb..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-lualatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-lualatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-lualatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 8aa2139809..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-lualatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,650 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/phil.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage{polyglossia} %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the
-\setmainlanguage{english} %% main locale instead of `english`, you
-%% can typeset the thesis in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
-\setotherlanguages{german, russian, czech, slovak} %% The
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\newfontfamily\russianfont[Script=Cyrillic,Ligatures=TeX]{PT Serif}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = phil,
- department = Department of Psychology,
- field = Cognitive Sciences,
- type = bc,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = What Can Typography Tell Us
- About the Nature of Man,
- TeXtitle = What Can Typography Tell Us\\
- About the Nature of Man,
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{lualatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-\ or %% Let us define a compound command:
-\def\citeauthoryear#1{(\textcite{#1},~\citeyear{#1})}%
-\citeauthoryear{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-pdflatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-pdflatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 5983cf9800..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-pdflatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-pdflatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-pdflatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 2811b6bfa5..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/phil-pdflatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,657 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/phil.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage[resetfonts]{cmap} %% We need to load the T2A font encoding
-\usepackage[T1,T2A]{fontenc} %% to use the Cyrillic fonts with Russian texts.
-\usepackage[
- main=english, %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the main locale
- %% instead of `english`, you can typeset the thesis
- %% in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
- english, german, russian, czech, slovak %% The additional keys allow
-]{babel} %% foreign texts to be typeset as follows:
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\usepackage{paratype}
-\def\textrussian#1{{\usefont{T2A}{PTSerif-TLF}{m}{rm}#1}}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = phil,
- department = Department of Psychology,
- field = Cognitive Sciences,
- type = bc,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = What Can Typography Tell Us
- About the Nature of Man,
- TeXtitle = What Can Typography Tell Us\\
- About the Nature of Man,
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}\textrussian{%
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-}\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{pdflatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\shorthandoff{-}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-\shorthandon{-}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-\ or %% Let us define a compound command:
-\def\citeauthoryear#1{(\textcite{#1},~\citeyear{#1})}%
-\citeauthoryear{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-lualatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-lualatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index f325377c23..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-lualatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-lualatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-lualatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 2196d089ac..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-lualatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,693 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/sci.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage{polyglossia} %% By using `czech` or `slovak` as the
-\setmainlanguage{english} %% main locale instead of `english`, you
-%% can typeset the thesis in either Czech or Slovak, respectively.
-\setotherlanguages{german, russian, czech, slovak} %% The
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\newfontfamily\russianfont[Script=Cyrillic,Ligatures=TeX]{PT Serif}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = sci,
- department = Ústav matematiky a štatistiky,
- departmentEn = Department of Mathematics and
- Statistics,
- extra = {
- departmentCs = Ústav matematiky a statistiky,
- },
- programme = Matematika,
- programmeEn = Mathematics,
- extra = {
- programmeCs = Matematika,
- },
- field = Finančná a poistná matematika,
- fieldEn = Financial and Insurance Mathematics,
- extra = {
- fieldCs = Finanční a pojistná matematika,
- },
- type = bc,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = Princípy matematickej sadzby v programe TeX,
- TeXtitle = Princípy matematickej sadzby\\v~programe \TeX,
- titleEn = The Principles of the Typesetting of
- Mathematics in TeX: the Program,
- TeXtitleEn = The Principles of the Typesetting of
- Mathematics in \TeX: the Program,
- extra = {
- titleCs = Principy matematické sazby v programu TeX,
- TeXtitleCs = Principy matematické sazby\\v~programu \TeX,
- },
- keywords = {kľúčové slovo 1, kľúčové slovo 2, ...},
- TeXkeywords = {kľúčové slovo 1, kľúčové slovo 2, \ldots},
- keywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- extra = {
- keywordsCs = {klíčové slovo 1, klíčové slovo 2, ...},
- TeXkeywordsCs = {klíčové slovo 1, klíčové slovo 2, \ldots},
- },
- abstract = {This is the abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- abstractEn = {This is the English abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- extra = {
- abstractCs = {This is the Czech abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- },
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
- %% Uncomment the following line (by removing the % symbol at
- %% the beginning) and replace `assignment.pdf` with the
- %% filename of your scanned thesis assignment.
- % assignment = assignment.pdf,
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{lualatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-\ or %% Let us define a compound command:
-\def\citeauthoryear#1{(\textcite{#1},~\citeyear{#1})}%
-\citeauthoryear{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-pdflatex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-pdflatex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index de60004980..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-pdflatex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-pdflatex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-pdflatex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 6b2e09372b..0000000000
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/example/mu/sci-pdflatex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,700 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% I, the copyright holder of this work, release this work into the
-%% public domain. This applies worldwide. In some countries this may
-%% not be legally possible; if so: I grant anyone the right to use
-%% this work for any purpose, without any conditions, unless such
-%% conditions are required by law.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\documentclass[
- digital, %% This option enables the default options for the
- %% digital version of a document. Replace with `printed`
- %% to enable the default options for the printed version
- %% of a document.
- twoside, %% This option enables double-sided typesetting. Use at
- %% least 120 g/m² paper to prevent show-through. Replace
- %% with `oneside` to use one-sided typesetting; use only
- %% if you don’t have access to a double-sided printer,
- %% or if one-sided typesetting is a formal requirement
- %% at your faculty.
- table, %% This option causes the coloring of tables. Replace
- %% with `notable` to restore plain LaTeX tables.
- lof, %% This option prints the List of Figures. Replace with
- %% `nolof` to hide the List of Figures.
- lot, %% This option prints the List of Tables. Replace with
- %% `nolot` to hide the List of Tables.
- %% More options are listed in the user guide at
- %% <http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/guide/mu/sci.pdf>.
-]{fithesis3}
-%% The following section sets up the locales used in the thesis.
-\usepackage[resetfonts]{cmap} %% We need to load the T2A font encoding
-\usepackage[T1,T2A]{fontenc} %% to use the Cyrillic fonts with Russian texts.
-\usepackage[
- main=slovak, %% By using `czech` or `english` as the main locale
- %% instead of `slovak`, you can typeset the thesis
- %% in either Czech or English, respectively.
- english, german, russian, czech, slovak %% The additional keys allow
-]{babel} %% foreign texts to be typeset as follows:
-%%
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{german} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{russian} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{czech} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%% \begin{otherlanguage}{slovak} ... \end{otherlanguage}
-%%
-%% For non-Latin scripts, it may be necessary to load additional
-%% fonts:
-\usepackage{paratype}
-\def\textrussian#1{{\usefont{T2A}{PTSerif-TLF}{m}{rm}#1}}
-%%
-%% The following section sets up the metadata of the thesis.
-\thesissetup{
- date = \the\year/\the\month/\the\day,
- university = mu,
- faculty = sci,
- department = Ústav matematiky a štatistiky,
- departmentEn = Department of Mathematics and
- Statistics,
- extra = {
- departmentCs = Ústav matematiky a statistiky,
- },
- programme = Matematika,
- programmeEn = Mathematics,
- extra = {
- programmeCs = Matematika,
- },
- field = Finančná a poistná matematika,
- fieldEn = Financial and Insurance Mathematics,
- extra = {
- fieldCs = Finanční a pojistná matematika,
- },
- type = bc,
- author = Jane Doe,
- gender = f,
- advisor = John Smith,
- title = Princípy matematickej sadzby v programe TeX,
- TeXtitle = Princípy matematickej sadzby\\v~programe \TeX,
- titleEn = The Principles of the Typesetting of
- Mathematics in TeX: the Program,
- TeXtitleEn = The Principles of the Typesetting of
- Mathematics in \TeX: the Program,
- extra = {
- titleCs = Principy matematické sazby v programu TeX,
- TeXtitleCs = Principy matematické sazby\\v~programu \TeX,
- },
- keywords = {kľúčové slovo 1, kľúčové slovo 2, ...},
- TeXkeywords = {kľúčové slovo 1, kľúčové slovo 2, \ldots},
- keywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, ...},
- TeXkeywordsEn = {keyword1, keyword2, \ldots},
- extra = {
- keywordsCs = {klíčové slovo 1, klíčové slovo 2, ...},
- TeXkeywordsCs = {klíčové slovo 1, klíčové slovo 2, \ldots},
- },
- abstract = {This is the abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- abstractEn = {This is the English abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- extra = {
- abstractCs = {This is the Czech abstract of my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- },
- thanks = {These are the acknowledgements for my thesis, which can
-
- span multiple paragraphs.},
- bib = example.bib,
- %% Uncomment the following line (by removing the % symbol at
- %% the beginning) and replace `assignment.pdf` with the
- %% filename of your scanned thesis assignment.
- % assignment = assignment.pdf,
-}
-\usepackage{makeidx} %% The `makeidx` package contains
-\makeindex %% helper commands for index typesetting.
-%% These additional packages are used within the document:
-\usepackage{paralist} %% Compact list environments
-\usepackage{amsmath} %% Mathematics
-\usepackage{amsthm}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\usepackage{url} %% Hyperlinks
-\usepackage{markdown} %% Lightweight markup
-\usepackage{listings} %% Source code highlighting
-\lstset{
- basicstyle = \ttfamily,%
- identifierstyle = \color{black},%
- keywordstyle = \color{blue},%
- keywordstyle = {[2]\color{cyan}},%
- keywordstyle = {[3]\color{olive}},%
- stringstyle = \color{teal},%
- commentstyle = \itshape\color{magenta}}
-\usepackage{floatrow} %% Putting captions above tables
-\floatsetup[table]{capposition=top}
-\begin{document}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Introduction}
-
-Theses are rumoured to be the capstones of education, so I decided
-to write one of my own. If all goes well, I will soon have a
-diploma under my belt. Wish me luck!
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{czech}
-Říká se, že závěrečné práce jsou vyvrcholením studia a tak jsem se
-rozhodl jednu také napsat. Pokud vše půjde podle plánu, odnesu si
-na konci semestru diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{slovak}
-Hovorí sa, že záverečné práce sú vyvrcholením štúdia a tak som sa
-rozhodol jednu tiež napísať. Ak všetko pôjde podľa plánu, odnesiem
-si na konci semestra diplom. Držte mi palce!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{german}
-Man munkelt, dass die Dissertation die Krönung der Ausbildung ist.
-Deshalb habe ich mich beschlossen meine eigene zu schreiben. Wenn
-alles gut geht, bekomme ich bald ein Diplom. Wünsch mir Glück!
-\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\begin{otherlanguage}{russian}\textrussian{%
-Говорят, что тезис -- это кульминация обучения. Поэтому я и решил
-написать собственный тезис. Если всё сработает по плану, я скоро
-получу диплом. Желайте мне удачи!
-}\end{otherlanguage}
-
-\chapter{These are}
-\section{the available}
-\subsection{sectioning}
-\subsubsection{commands.}
-\paragraph{Paragraphs and}
-\subparagraph{subparagraphs are available as well.}
-Inside the text, you can also use unnumbered lists,
-\begin{itemize}
- \item such as
- \item this one
- \begin{itemize}
- \item and they can be nested as well.
- \item[>>] You can even turn the bullets into something fancier,
- \item[\S] if you so desire.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{itemize}
-Numbered lists are
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item very
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item similar
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}
-and so are description lists:
-\begin{description}
- \item[Description list]
- A list of terms with a description of each term
-\end{description}
-The spacing of these lists is geared towards paragraphs of text.
-For lists of words and phrases, the \textsf{paralist} package
-offers commands
-\begin{compactitem}
- \item that
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item are
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item better
- \begin{compactitem}
- \item suited
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
- \end{compactitem}
-\end{compactitem}
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item to
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item this
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item kind of
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item content.
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
- \end{compactenum}
-\end{compactenum}
-The \textsf{amsthm} package provides the commands necessary for the
-typesetting of mathematical definitions, theorems, lemmas and
-proofs.
-
-%% We will define several mathematical sectioning commands.
-\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] %% The numbering of theorems
- %% will be reset after each section.
-\newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} %% The numbering of lemmas
-\newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} %% and corollaries will
- %% share the counter with theorems.
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{definition}{Definition}
-\theoremstyle{remark}
-\newtheorem*{remark}{Remark}
-
-\begin{theorem}
- This is a theorem that offers a profound insight into the
- mathematical sectioning commands.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{theorem}[Another theorem]
- This is another theorem. Unlike the first one, this theorem has
- been endowed with a name.
-\end{theorem}
-\begin{lemma}
- Let us suppose that $x^2+y^2=z^2$. Then
- \begin{equation}
- \biggl\langle u\biggm|\sum_{i=1}^nF(e_i,v)e_i\biggr\rangle
- =F\biggl(\sum_{i=1}^n\langle e_i|u\rangle e_i,v\biggr).
- \end{equation}
-\end{lemma}
-\begin{proof}
- $\nabla^2 f(x,y)=\frac{\partial^2f}{\partial x^2}+
- \frac{\partial^2f}{\partial y^2}$.
-\end{proof}
-\begin{corollary}
- This is a corollary.
-\end{corollary}
-\begin{remark}
- This is a remark.
-\end{remark}
-
-\chapter{Floats and references}
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- %% PNG and JPG images can be inserted into the document as well,
- %% but their resolution needs to be adequate. The minimum is
- %% about 100 pixels per 1 centimeter or 300 pixels per 1 inch.
- %% That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset at 4 × 4 cm should
- %% be 400 × 400 px large at the bare minimum.
- %%
- %% The optimum is about 250 pixels per 1 centimeter or 600
- %% pixels per 1 inch. That means that a JPG or PNG image typeset
- %% at 4 × 4 cm should be 1000 × 1000 px large or larger.
- \includegraphics[width=4cm]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at 40\,mm}
- \label{fig:mulogo1}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{minipage}{.66\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \begin{minipage}{.33\textwidth}
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf} \\
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf}
- \end{minipage}
- \end{center}
- \caption{The logo of the Masaryk University at $\frac23$ and
- $\frac13$ of text width}
- \label{fig:mulogo2}
-\end{figure}
-
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lllX}
- \toprule
- Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\
- \midrule
- Monday & $13^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- clear day with low wind and no adverse current advisories. \\
- Tuesday & $11^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ & $17^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & A
- trough of low pressure will come from the northwest. \\
- Wednesday & $10^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ &
- $21^\circ\mathrm{C}$ & Rain will spread to all parts during the
- morning. \\
- \bottomrule
- \end{tabularx}
- \caption{A weather forecast}
- \label{tab:weather}
-\end{table}
-
-The logo of the Masaryk University is shown in Figure
-\ref{fig:mulogo1} and Figure \ref{fig:mulogo2} at pages
-\pageref{fig:mulogo1} and \pageref{fig:mulogo2}. The weather
-forecast is shown in Table \ref{tab:weather} at page
-\pageref{tab:weather}. The following chapter is Chapter
-\ref{chap:matheq} and starts at page \pageref{chap:matheq}.
-Items \ref{item:star1}, \ref{item:star2}, and
-\ref{item:star3} are starred in the following list:
-\begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star1}
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star2}
- \item some other text
- \begin{compactenum}
- \item some text
- \item some other text
- \item yet another piece of text
- \item $\star$ \label{item:star3}
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
- \end{compactenum}
- \item yet another piece of text
-\end{compactenum}
-If your reference points to a place that has not yet been typeset,
-the \verb"\ref" command will expand to \textbf{??} during the first
-run of
-\texttt{pdflatex \jobname.tex}
-and a second run is going to be needed for the references to
-resolve. With online services -- such as Overleaf -- this is
-performed automatically.
-
-\chapter{Mathematical equations}
-\label{chap:matheq}
-\TeX{} comes pre-packed with the ability to typeset inline
-equations, such as $\mathrm{e}^{ix}=\cos x+i\sin x$, and display
-equations, such as \[
- \mathbf{A}^{-1} = \begin{bmatrix}
- a & b \\ c & d \\
- \end{bmatrix}^{-1} =
- \frac{1}{\det(\mathbf{A})} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix} =
- \frac{1}{ad - bc} \begin{bmatrix}
- \,\,\,d & \!\!-b \\ -c & \,a \\
- \end{bmatrix}.
-\] \LaTeX{} defines the automatically numbered \texttt{equation}
-environment:
-\begin{equation}
- \gamma Px = PAx = PAP^{-1}Px.
-\end{equation}
-The package \textsf{amsmath} provides several additional
-environments that can be used to typeset complex equations:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item An equation can be spread over multiple lines using the
- \texttt{multline} environment:
- \begin{multline}
- a + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e + f + b + c + d + e +
-f \\
- + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p + q
- \end{multline}
-
- \item Several aligned equations can be typeset using the
- \texttt{align} environment:
- \begin{align}
- a + b &= c + d \\
- u &= v + w + x \\[1ex]
- i + j + k + l &= m
- \end{align}
-
- \item The \texttt{alignat} environment is similar to
- \texttt{align}, but it doesn't insert horizontal spaces between
- the individual columns:
- \begin{alignat}{2}
- a + b + c &+ d & &= 0 \\
- e &+ f + g & &= 5
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item Much like chapter, sections, tables, figures, or list
- items, equations -- such as \eqref{eq:first} and
- \eqref{eq:mine} -- can also be labeled and referenced:
- \begin{alignat}{4}
- b_{11}x_1 &+ b_{12}x_2 & &+ b_{13}x_3 & & &
- &= y_1, \label{eq:first} \\
- b_{21}x_1 &+ b_{22}x_2 & & & &+ b_{24}x_4 &
- &= y_2. \tag{My equation} \label{eq:mine}
- \end{alignat}
-
- \item The \texttt{gather} environment makes it possible to
- typeset several equations without any alignment:
- \begin{gather}
- \psi = \psi\psi, \\
- \eta = \eta\eta\eta\eta\eta\eta, \\
- \theta = \theta.
- \end{gather}
-
- \item Several cases can be typeset using the \texttt{cases}
- environment:
- \begin{equation}
- |y| = \begin{cases}
- \phantom-y & \text{if }z\geq0, \\
- -y & \text{otherwise}.
- \end{cases}
- \end{equation}
-\end{enumerate}
-For the complete list of environments and commands, consult the
-\textsf{amsmath} package manual\footnote{
- See \url{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/amsldoc.pdf}.
- The \texttt{\textbackslash url} command is provided by the
- package \textsf{url}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{\textnormal{We \textsf{have} \texttt{several} \textsc{fonts}
- \textit{at} \textbf{disposal}}}
-The serified roman font is used for the main body of the text.
-\textit{Italics are typically used to denote emphasis or
-quotations.} \texttt{The teletype font is typically used for source
-code listings.} The \textbf{bold}, \textsc{small-caps} and
-\textsf{sans-serif} variants of the base roman font can be used to
-denote specific types of information.
-
-\tiny We \scriptsize can \footnotesize also \small change \normalsize
-the \large font \Large size, \LARGE although \huge it \Huge
-is \huge usually \LARGE not \Large necessary.\normalsize
-
-A wide variety of mathematical fonts is also available, such as: \[
- \mathrm{ABC}, \mathcal{ABC}, \mathbf{ABC}, \mathsf{ABC},
- \mathit{ABC}, \mathtt{ABC}
-\] By loading the \textsf{amsfonts} packages, several additional
-fonts will become available: \[
- \mathfrak{ABC}, \mathbb{ABC}
-\] Many other mathematical fonts are available\footnote{
- See \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/58124/70941}.
-}.
-
-\chapter{Using lightweight markup}
-\shorthandoff{-}
-\begin{markdown*}{%
- hybrid,
- definitionLists,
- footnotes,
- inlineFootnotes,
- hashEnumerators,
- fencedCode,
- citations,
- citationNbsps,
-}
-
-If you decide that \LaTeX{} is too wordy for some parts of your
-document, there are [packages](https://www.ctan.org/pkg/markdown
-"Markdown") that allow you to use more lightweight markup next
-to it.
-
- ![logo](fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf "The logo of the
- Masaryk University")
-
-This is a bullet list. Unlike numbered lists, bulleted lists
-contain an **unordered** set of bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- * The first item of a bullet list,
- * the second item of a bullet list,
- * the third item of a bullet list.
-
-Unlike a bulleted list, a numbered list implies chronology or
-ordering of the bullet points. When a bullet point
-contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset as follows:
-
- 1. The first item of an ordered list
-
- that spans several paragraphs,
- 2. the second item of an ordered list,
- 3. the third item of an ordered list.
- #. If you are feeling lazy,
- #. you can use hash enumerators as well.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
- 6. The first item of an ordered list,
- 7. the second item of an ordered list,
- 8. the third item of an ordered list.
-
-Definition lists are used to provide definitions of terms. When
-a definition contains multiple paragraphs, the list is typeset
-as follows:
-
-Term 1
-
-: Definition 1
-
-*Term 2*
-
-: Definition 2
-
- Some code, part of Definition 2
-
- Third paragraph of Definition 2.
-
-When none of the bullet points contains multiple paragraphs, the
-list has a more compact form:
-
-Term 1
-: Definition 1
-*Term 2*
-: Definition 2
-
-Block quotations are used to include an excerpt from an external
-document in way that visually clearly separates the excerpt from
-the rest of the work:
-
-> This is the first level of quoting.
->
-> > This is nested blockquote.
->
-> Back to the first level.
-
-Footnotes are used to include additional information to the
-document that are not necessary for the understanding of the main
-text. Here is a footnote reference^[Here is the footnote.] and
-another.[^longnote]
-
-[^longnote]: Here's one with multiple blocks.
-
- Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
-belong to the previous footnote.
-
- Some code
-
- The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
- line. In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
- multi-paragraph list items.
-
-Citations are used to provide bibliographical references to other
-documents. This is a regular citation~[@borgman03, p. 123]. This is
-an in-text citation: @borgman03\. You can also cite several authors
-at once using both regular~[see @borgman03, p. 123; @greenberg98,
-sec. 3.2; and @thanh01] and in-text citations: @borgman03 [p.123;
-@greenberg98, sec. 3.2; @thanh01].
-
-Code blocks are used to include source code listings into the
-document:
-
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <sys/types.h>
- #include <sys/wait.h>
- // This is a comment
- int main(int argc, char **argv)
- {
- while (--c > 1 && !fork());
- sleep(c = atoi(v[c]));
- printf("%d\n", c);
- wait(0);
- return 0;
- }
-
-There is an alternative syntax for code blocks that allows you to
-specify additional information, such as the language of the source
-code. This information can be used for syntax highlighting:
-
-``` sh
-#!/bin/sh
-fac() {
- if [ "$1" -leq 1 ]; then
- echo 1
- else
- echo $(("$1" * fac $(("$1" - 1))))
- fi
-}
-``````````````
-
-~~~~~~ Ruby
-# Here's a way to empty an array.
-joe = [ 'eggs.', 'some', 'break', 'to', 'Have' ]
-print(joe.pop, " ") while joe.size > 0
-print "\n"
-~~~~~~
-
-\end{markdown*}
-\shorthandon{-}
-
-\chapter{Inserting the bibliography}
-After linking a bibliography data\-base files to the document using
-the \verb"\"\texttt{thesis\discretionary{-}{}{}setup\{bib\discretionary{=}{=}{=}%
-\{\textit{file1},\textit{file2},\,\ldots\,\}\}} command, you can
-start citing the entries. This is just dummy text
-\parencite{borgman03} lightly sprinkled with citations
-\parencite[p.~123]{greenberg98}. Several sources can be cited at
-once: \cite{borgman03,greenberg98,thanh01}.
-\citetitle{greenberg98} was written by \citeauthor{greenberg98} in
-\citeyear{greenberg98}. We can also produce \textcite{greenberg98}%
-\ or %% Let us define a compound command:
-\def\citeauthoryear#1{(\textcite{#1},~\citeyear{#1})}%
-\citeauthoryear{greenberg98}%
-. The full bibliographic citation is:
-\emph{\fullcite{greenberg98}}. We can easily insert a bibliographic
-citation into the footnote\footfullcite{greenberg98}.
-
-The \verb"\nocite" command will not generate any
-output\nocite{muni}, but it will insert its arguments into
-the bibliography. The \verb"\nocite{*}" command will insert all the
-records in the bibliography database file into the bibliography.
-Try uncommenting the command
-%% \nocite{*}
-and watch the bibliography section come apart at the seams.
-
-When typesetting the document for the first time, citing a
-\texttt{work} will expand to [\textbf{work}] and the
-\verb"\printbibliography" command will produce no output. It is now
-necessary to generate the bibliography by running \texttt{biber
-\jobname.bcf} from the command line and then by typesetting the
-document again twice. During the first run, the bibliography
-section and the citations will be typeset, and in the second run,
-the bibliography section will appear in the table of contents.
-
-The \texttt{biber} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open
-Command Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- or when using an
-automatic tool -- such as \LaTeX MK -- all commands are executed
-automatically. When you omit the \verb"\printbibliography" command,
-its location will be decided by the template.
-
- \printbibliography[heading=bibintoc] %% Print the bibliography.
-
-\chapter{Inserting the index}
-After using the \verb"\makeindex" macro and loading the
-\texttt{makeidx} package that provides additional indexing
-commands, index entries can be created by issuing the \verb"\index"
-command. \index{dummy text|(}It is possible to create ranged index
-entries, which will encompass a span of text.\index{dummy text|)}
-To insert complex typographic material -- such as $\alpha$
-\index{alpha@$\alpha$} or \TeX{} \index{TeX@\TeX} --
-into the index, you need to specify a text string, which will
-determine how the entry will be sorted. It is also possible to
-create hierarchal entries. \index{vehicles!trucks}
-\index{vehicles!speed cars}
-
-After typesetting the document, it is necessary to generate the
-index by running
-\begin{center}%
- \texttt{texindy -I latex -C utf8 -L }$\langle$\textit{locale}%
- $\rangle$\texttt{ \jobname.idx}
-\end{center}
-from the command line, where $\langle$\textit{locale}$\rangle$
-corresponds to the main locale of your thesis -- such as
-\texttt{english}, and then typesetting the document again.
-
-The \texttt{texindy} command needs to be executed from within the
-directory, where the \LaTeX\ source file is located. In Windows,
-the command line can be opened in a directory by holding down the
-\textsf{Shift} key and by clicking the right mouse button while
-hovering the cursor over a directory. Select the \textsf{Open Command
-Window Here} option in the context menu that opens shortly
-afterwards.
-
-With online services -- such as Overleaf -- the commands are
-executed automatically, although the locale may be erroneously
-detected, or the \texttt{makeindex} tool (which is only able to
-sort entries that contain digits and letters of the English
-alphabet) may be used instead of \texttt{texindy}. In either case,
-the index will be ill-sorted.
-
- \makeatletter\thesis@blocks@clear\makeatother
- \phantomsection %% Print the index and insert it into the
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} %% table of contents.
- \printindex
-
-\appendix %% Start the appendices.
-\chapter{An appendix}
-Here you can insert the appendices of your thesis.
-
-\end{document}